Important User InformationSolid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Appli-cation Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales officeor online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wiredelectromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons re-sponsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or applicationof this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements as-sociated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the ex-amples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described inthis manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
Allen-Bradley Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
Table of Contents
Preface Purpose of this Manual 5
Chapter 1Introduction FactoryTalk Security 7
FactoryTalk Directories 7RSSecurity Server 8
Chapter 2Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction 9Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator 9Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software 13Install FactoryTalk Service Platform 14Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File 18Apply Security to a Controller Resource 22
Chapter 3Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction 25Import a Security Server Database 25
Import Status Text File 28Organizer Import Result 29Resource Editor 29
Chapter 4Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction 31Installation 31Configuring Source Protection on a project file 32Key File and Key Distribution 39
Remove Access to a Protected Routine 40Disable Routine Source Protection 41
Chapter 5RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction 43Installation 43Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool 46
Accessing a Secured Controller 49Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool 51Removing a Password 52
Rockwell Automation Support 60Installation Assistance 60New Product Satisfaction Return 60
3Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 3
Table of Contents
Notes
4 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual explains how to configure security for RSLogix 5000 software It also explains how to setup source protection for your logic and projects This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
This chapter explains what FactoryTalk Security is and how you can implement security FactoryTalk Security integrates a common security model across all FactoryTalk enabled products The evolution of FactoryTalk Security software continues with the addition of more products and additional security functionality
FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Services Platform (FTSP) includes the FactoryTalk Administration Console (FTAC) which provides the interface for configuring your system The installation of FTSP has been significantly updated in Release 1603 Instead of prompting you to create individual FactoryTalk Administrator accounts FTSP will automatically assign the local computers Windows Administrators as FactoryTalk administrators
FactoryTalk Directories
An important aspect to implementing FactoryTalk Security is the multiple FactoryTalk Directories In the FactoryTalk architecture there are two separate Directory types Local and Network A FactoryTalk Local directory is utilized when all the Rockwell Automation Software products run on a single computer The Local FactoryTalk Directory is used for products such as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) and FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) Station (Standalone)
Refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
The FactoryTalk Network Directory is used when multiple Rockwell Automation Software products need to share information across multiple computer systems The FactoryTalk Network Directory allows these systems to share a common FactoryTalk Directory for products such as FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk Integrator FactoryTalk Batch and FactoryTalk AssetCenter
When securing controllers using the RSLogix family of editors (RSLogix 5 500 5000) you can use either the FactoryTalk Local or the Network Directories If you are trying to coordinate security across multiple computers you will need a Network Directory implementation of FactoryTalk Security If all of your products reside on a single computer you will want to utilize Local FactoryTalk Directory
7Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
RSSecurity Server
Security implemented in existing products will be migrated into the new FactoryTalk Security system by utilities in those specific products For those products currently using RSSecurity it is possible to coexist with FactoryTalk Security Alternatively you can migrate to the new system If migrating to the new system is desirable then any product that referenced the RSSecurity Server can interface to the FactoryTalk Security system via the RSSecurity Emulator This Security Emulator can be installed once FTSP is installed on any computer that will host products such as RSLogix 5000 and RSLinx Classic
8 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Important User InformationSolid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Appli-cation Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales officeor online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wiredelectromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons re-sponsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or applicationof this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements as-sociated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the ex-amples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described inthis manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
Allen-Bradley Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence
SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
Table of Contents
Preface Purpose of this Manual 5
Chapter 1Introduction FactoryTalk Security 7
FactoryTalk Directories 7RSSecurity Server 8
Chapter 2Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction 9Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator 9Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software 13Install FactoryTalk Service Platform 14Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File 18Apply Security to a Controller Resource 22
Chapter 3Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction 25Import a Security Server Database 25
Import Status Text File 28Organizer Import Result 29Resource Editor 29
Chapter 4Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction 31Installation 31Configuring Source Protection on a project file 32Key File and Key Distribution 39
Remove Access to a Protected Routine 40Disable Routine Source Protection 41
Chapter 5RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction 43Installation 43Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool 46
Accessing a Secured Controller 49Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool 51Removing a Password 52
Rockwell Automation Support 60Installation Assistance 60New Product Satisfaction Return 60
3Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 3
Table of Contents
Notes
4 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual explains how to configure security for RSLogix 5000 software It also explains how to setup source protection for your logic and projects This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
This chapter explains what FactoryTalk Security is and how you can implement security FactoryTalk Security integrates a common security model across all FactoryTalk enabled products The evolution of FactoryTalk Security software continues with the addition of more products and additional security functionality
FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Services Platform (FTSP) includes the FactoryTalk Administration Console (FTAC) which provides the interface for configuring your system The installation of FTSP has been significantly updated in Release 1603 Instead of prompting you to create individual FactoryTalk Administrator accounts FTSP will automatically assign the local computers Windows Administrators as FactoryTalk administrators
FactoryTalk Directories
An important aspect to implementing FactoryTalk Security is the multiple FactoryTalk Directories In the FactoryTalk architecture there are two separate Directory types Local and Network A FactoryTalk Local directory is utilized when all the Rockwell Automation Software products run on a single computer The Local FactoryTalk Directory is used for products such as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) and FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) Station (Standalone)
Refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
The FactoryTalk Network Directory is used when multiple Rockwell Automation Software products need to share information across multiple computer systems The FactoryTalk Network Directory allows these systems to share a common FactoryTalk Directory for products such as FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk Integrator FactoryTalk Batch and FactoryTalk AssetCenter
When securing controllers using the RSLogix family of editors (RSLogix 5 500 5000) you can use either the FactoryTalk Local or the Network Directories If you are trying to coordinate security across multiple computers you will need a Network Directory implementation of FactoryTalk Security If all of your products reside on a single computer you will want to utilize Local FactoryTalk Directory
7Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
RSSecurity Server
Security implemented in existing products will be migrated into the new FactoryTalk Security system by utilities in those specific products For those products currently using RSSecurity it is possible to coexist with FactoryTalk Security Alternatively you can migrate to the new system If migrating to the new system is desirable then any product that referenced the RSSecurity Server can interface to the FactoryTalk Security system via the RSSecurity Emulator This Security Emulator can be installed once FTSP is installed on any computer that will host products such as RSLogix 5000 and RSLinx Classic
8 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Table of Contents
Preface Purpose of this Manual 5
Chapter 1Introduction FactoryTalk Security 7
FactoryTalk Directories 7RSSecurity Server 8
Chapter 2Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction 9Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator 9Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software 13Install FactoryTalk Service Platform 14Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File 18Apply Security to a Controller Resource 22
Chapter 3Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction 25Import a Security Server Database 25
Import Status Text File 28Organizer Import Result 29Resource Editor 29
Chapter 4Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction 31Installation 31Configuring Source Protection on a project file 32Key File and Key Distribution 39
Remove Access to a Protected Routine 40Disable Routine Source Protection 41
Chapter 5RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction 43Installation 43Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool 46
Accessing a Secured Controller 49Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool 51Removing a Password 52
Rockwell Automation Support 60Installation Assistance 60New Product Satisfaction Return 60
3Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 3
Table of Contents
Notes
4 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual explains how to configure security for RSLogix 5000 software It also explains how to setup source protection for your logic and projects This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
This chapter explains what FactoryTalk Security is and how you can implement security FactoryTalk Security integrates a common security model across all FactoryTalk enabled products The evolution of FactoryTalk Security software continues with the addition of more products and additional security functionality
FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Services Platform (FTSP) includes the FactoryTalk Administration Console (FTAC) which provides the interface for configuring your system The installation of FTSP has been significantly updated in Release 1603 Instead of prompting you to create individual FactoryTalk Administrator accounts FTSP will automatically assign the local computers Windows Administrators as FactoryTalk administrators
FactoryTalk Directories
An important aspect to implementing FactoryTalk Security is the multiple FactoryTalk Directories In the FactoryTalk architecture there are two separate Directory types Local and Network A FactoryTalk Local directory is utilized when all the Rockwell Automation Software products run on a single computer The Local FactoryTalk Directory is used for products such as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) and FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) Station (Standalone)
Refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
The FactoryTalk Network Directory is used when multiple Rockwell Automation Software products need to share information across multiple computer systems The FactoryTalk Network Directory allows these systems to share a common FactoryTalk Directory for products such as FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk Integrator FactoryTalk Batch and FactoryTalk AssetCenter
When securing controllers using the RSLogix family of editors (RSLogix 5 500 5000) you can use either the FactoryTalk Local or the Network Directories If you are trying to coordinate security across multiple computers you will need a Network Directory implementation of FactoryTalk Security If all of your products reside on a single computer you will want to utilize Local FactoryTalk Directory
7Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
RSSecurity Server
Security implemented in existing products will be migrated into the new FactoryTalk Security system by utilities in those specific products For those products currently using RSSecurity it is possible to coexist with FactoryTalk Security Alternatively you can migrate to the new system If migrating to the new system is desirable then any product that referenced the RSSecurity Server can interface to the FactoryTalk Security system via the RSSecurity Emulator This Security Emulator can be installed once FTSP is installed on any computer that will host products such as RSLogix 5000 and RSLinx Classic
8 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Table of Contents
Notes
4 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual explains how to configure security for RSLogix 5000 software It also explains how to setup source protection for your logic and projects This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
This chapter explains what FactoryTalk Security is and how you can implement security FactoryTalk Security integrates a common security model across all FactoryTalk enabled products The evolution of FactoryTalk Security software continues with the addition of more products and additional security functionality
FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Services Platform (FTSP) includes the FactoryTalk Administration Console (FTAC) which provides the interface for configuring your system The installation of FTSP has been significantly updated in Release 1603 Instead of prompting you to create individual FactoryTalk Administrator accounts FTSP will automatically assign the local computers Windows Administrators as FactoryTalk administrators
FactoryTalk Directories
An important aspect to implementing FactoryTalk Security is the multiple FactoryTalk Directories In the FactoryTalk architecture there are two separate Directory types Local and Network A FactoryTalk Local directory is utilized when all the Rockwell Automation Software products run on a single computer The Local FactoryTalk Directory is used for products such as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) and FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) Station (Standalone)
Refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
The FactoryTalk Network Directory is used when multiple Rockwell Automation Software products need to share information across multiple computer systems The FactoryTalk Network Directory allows these systems to share a common FactoryTalk Directory for products such as FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk Integrator FactoryTalk Batch and FactoryTalk AssetCenter
When securing controllers using the RSLogix family of editors (RSLogix 5 500 5000) you can use either the FactoryTalk Local or the Network Directories If you are trying to coordinate security across multiple computers you will need a Network Directory implementation of FactoryTalk Security If all of your products reside on a single computer you will want to utilize Local FactoryTalk Directory
7Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
RSSecurity Server
Security implemented in existing products will be migrated into the new FactoryTalk Security system by utilities in those specific products For those products currently using RSSecurity it is possible to coexist with FactoryTalk Security Alternatively you can migrate to the new system If migrating to the new system is desirable then any product that referenced the RSSecurity Server can interface to the FactoryTalk Security system via the RSSecurity Emulator This Security Emulator can be installed once FTSP is installed on any computer that will host products such as RSLogix 5000 and RSLinx Classic
8 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual explains how to configure security for RSLogix 5000 software It also explains how to setup source protection for your logic and projects This manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for programming and operating Logix5000 controllers For a complete list of common procedures manuals see the Logix 5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756-PM001
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the Logix5000 operating system such as
This chapter explains what FactoryTalk Security is and how you can implement security FactoryTalk Security integrates a common security model across all FactoryTalk enabled products The evolution of FactoryTalk Security software continues with the addition of more products and additional security functionality
FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Services Platform (FTSP) includes the FactoryTalk Administration Console (FTAC) which provides the interface for configuring your system The installation of FTSP has been significantly updated in Release 1603 Instead of prompting you to create individual FactoryTalk Administrator accounts FTSP will automatically assign the local computers Windows Administrators as FactoryTalk administrators
FactoryTalk Directories
An important aspect to implementing FactoryTalk Security is the multiple FactoryTalk Directories In the FactoryTalk architecture there are two separate Directory types Local and Network A FactoryTalk Local directory is utilized when all the Rockwell Automation Software products run on a single computer The Local FactoryTalk Directory is used for products such as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) and FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) Station (Standalone)
Refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
The FactoryTalk Network Directory is used when multiple Rockwell Automation Software products need to share information across multiple computer systems The FactoryTalk Network Directory allows these systems to share a common FactoryTalk Directory for products such as FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk Integrator FactoryTalk Batch and FactoryTalk AssetCenter
When securing controllers using the RSLogix family of editors (RSLogix 5 500 5000) you can use either the FactoryTalk Local or the Network Directories If you are trying to coordinate security across multiple computers you will need a Network Directory implementation of FactoryTalk Security If all of your products reside on a single computer you will want to utilize Local FactoryTalk Directory
7Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
RSSecurity Server
Security implemented in existing products will be migrated into the new FactoryTalk Security system by utilities in those specific products For those products currently using RSSecurity it is possible to coexist with FactoryTalk Security Alternatively you can migrate to the new system If migrating to the new system is desirable then any product that referenced the RSSecurity Server can interface to the FactoryTalk Security system via the RSSecurity Emulator This Security Emulator can be installed once FTSP is installed on any computer that will host products such as RSLogix 5000 and RSLinx Classic
8 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Preface
Notes
6 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter explains what FactoryTalk Security is and how you can implement security FactoryTalk Security integrates a common security model across all FactoryTalk enabled products The evolution of FactoryTalk Security software continues with the addition of more products and additional security functionality
FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Services Platform (FTSP) includes the FactoryTalk Administration Console (FTAC) which provides the interface for configuring your system The installation of FTSP has been significantly updated in Release 1603 Instead of prompting you to create individual FactoryTalk Administrator accounts FTSP will automatically assign the local computers Windows Administrators as FactoryTalk administrators
FactoryTalk Directories
An important aspect to implementing FactoryTalk Security is the multiple FactoryTalk Directories In the FactoryTalk architecture there are two separate Directory types Local and Network A FactoryTalk Local directory is utilized when all the Rockwell Automation Software products run on a single computer The Local FactoryTalk Directory is used for products such as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) and FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) Station (Standalone)
Refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
The FactoryTalk Network Directory is used when multiple Rockwell Automation Software products need to share information across multiple computer systems The FactoryTalk Network Directory allows these systems to share a common FactoryTalk Directory for products such as FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk Integrator FactoryTalk Batch and FactoryTalk AssetCenter
When securing controllers using the RSLogix family of editors (RSLogix 5 500 5000) you can use either the FactoryTalk Local or the Network Directories If you are trying to coordinate security across multiple computers you will need a Network Directory implementation of FactoryTalk Security If all of your products reside on a single computer you will want to utilize Local FactoryTalk Directory
7Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
RSSecurity Server
Security implemented in existing products will be migrated into the new FactoryTalk Security system by utilities in those specific products For those products currently using RSSecurity it is possible to coexist with FactoryTalk Security Alternatively you can migrate to the new system If migrating to the new system is desirable then any product that referenced the RSSecurity Server can interface to the FactoryTalk Security system via the RSSecurity Emulator This Security Emulator can be installed once FTSP is installed on any computer that will host products such as RSLogix 5000 and RSLinx Classic
8 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter explains what FactoryTalk Security is and how you can implement security FactoryTalk Security integrates a common security model across all FactoryTalk enabled products The evolution of FactoryTalk Security software continues with the addition of more products and additional security functionality
FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Services Platform (FTSP) includes the FactoryTalk Administration Console (FTAC) which provides the interface for configuring your system The installation of FTSP has been significantly updated in Release 1603 Instead of prompting you to create individual FactoryTalk Administrator accounts FTSP will automatically assign the local computers Windows Administrators as FactoryTalk administrators
FactoryTalk Directories
An important aspect to implementing FactoryTalk Security is the multiple FactoryTalk Directories In the FactoryTalk architecture there are two separate Directory types Local and Network A FactoryTalk Local directory is utilized when all the Rockwell Automation Software products run on a single computer The Local FactoryTalk Directory is used for products such as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) and FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) Station (Standalone)
Refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
The FactoryTalk Network Directory is used when multiple Rockwell Automation Software products need to share information across multiple computer systems The FactoryTalk Network Directory allows these systems to share a common FactoryTalk Directory for products such as FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk Integrator FactoryTalk Batch and FactoryTalk AssetCenter
When securing controllers using the RSLogix family of editors (RSLogix 5 500 5000) you can use either the FactoryTalk Local or the Network Directories If you are trying to coordinate security across multiple computers you will need a Network Directory implementation of FactoryTalk Security If all of your products reside on a single computer you will want to utilize Local FactoryTalk Directory
7Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
RSSecurity Server
Security implemented in existing products will be migrated into the new FactoryTalk Security system by utilities in those specific products For those products currently using RSSecurity it is possible to coexist with FactoryTalk Security Alternatively you can migrate to the new system If migrating to the new system is desirable then any product that referenced the RSSecurity Server can interface to the FactoryTalk Security system via the RSSecurity Emulator This Security Emulator can be installed once FTSP is installed on any computer that will host products such as RSLogix 5000 and RSLinx Classic
8 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 1 Introduction
RSSecurity Server
Security implemented in existing products will be migrated into the new FactoryTalk Security system by utilities in those specific products For those products currently using RSSecurity it is possible to coexist with FactoryTalk Security Alternatively you can migrate to the new system If migrating to the new system is desirable then any product that referenced the RSSecurity Server can interface to the FactoryTalk Security system via the RSSecurity Emulator This Security Emulator can be installed once FTSP is installed on any computer that will host products such as RSLogix 5000 and RSLinx Classic
8 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction This chapter describes how to install and configure FactoryTalk Security FactoryTalk Security Service Platform (FTSP) software during the installation of RSLogix5000 software If you find that the Security feature is not enabled in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to enable the feature Refer to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
RSLogix 5000 software uses the Rockwell Software Security Emulator to communicate with FactoryTalk Security Follow these instructions to install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
1 From the Start menu select ProgramsgtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk ToolsgtRSSecurity Emulator Install
9Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 9
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
2 Select Next on the Welcome screen
3 Click the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
4 Select Next on the Customer Information screen
10 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
5 Choose the Setup Type and click Next
6 Select the FactoryTalk Directory for the Emulator to work with
The RSSecurity Emulator can only communicate to one FactoryTalk Directory
7 Select Next to continue
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 11
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
8 Click Next to begin the install
Install Status screen displays
9 Click Finish to complete the installation
12 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
The SetSecKeys utility must be executed to enable security for RSLogix 5000 software
This file is added to the system during the RSLogix 5000 install
2 Double-click the file to begin configuration
3 Select the RS5000Keysini file and click Open
ATTENTION Once you have enabled security only Rockwell Automation Technical Support can turn off RSLogix 5000 security
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 13
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
4 Check RSLogix 5000 and click OK
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
If you find that the Security feature does not enable in RSLogix5000 software as shown in this screen you will need to make sure FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) is installed properly
Follow these instructions to install the FactoryTalk Service Platform (FTSP) software
14 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
1 Locate and double-click to run the Setupexe file The file is at the following location on the install disk
2 Click Next on the Welcome screen
3 Check the I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 15
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
The installation options screen displays
This displays the installation options available to you contained in this installation file This screen lets you select if you want the FactoryTalk Administration Console installed You may not want to install the Administration Console on every system
4 Click Next to continue
5 Click Install to begin the installation
Status Screen displays
16 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
The installation automatically configures the FactoryTalk Local and Network Directories During configuration the install will backup existing FactoryTalk Directories On upgrades from earlier versions the backup will backup the exiting FactoryTalk Directory For new installations the pre-configured FactoryTalk Directories will be backed up
The backups let you restore a FactoryTalk Directory to a previous software release
6 Click Finish to complete the installation
After the installation is complete refer back to Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software on page 13 If you are still having problems refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 17
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Once you have configured the RSLogix 5000 software to be security aware the next step is to enable security in a RSLogix 5000 software project file Follow these steps to secure a project file
1 Launch RSLogix 5000 from the start
menu or the program icon
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from versions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
2 If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
3 Open the RSLogix 5000 project file that you want to secure
In this example the DayOfWeek example project file was opened
18 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
4 Open the Controller Properties page from the Edit Menu
5 Record the Name of the Project file displayed on the General tab In this example the name is DayOfWeek
6 Select the Advanced tab in the Controller Properties window
TIP The name of the Controller can match the name of the ACD file but is not required to
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 19
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
7 Change the Security setting to FactoryTalk and click OK
8 Click Yes on the warning dial box to confirm you want to enable security for the project file
9 Save the project file
10 From the Communication menu select Who Active
20 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
11 In the Who Active windows locate and select the controller resource
12 Click Download to continue
13 After the download completes close RSLogix 5000 software If prompted save changes
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 21
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
Follow these steps to apply security to a controller resource
1 Open the FactoryTalk Administration Console select StartgtPrograms gtRockwell SoftwaregtFactoryTalk Administration Console
2 Select the FactoryTalk Directory that the RSSecurity Emulator was configured to work with
Refer to the selection you made in the section Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator on page 9
The default FactoryTalk Security configuration has Single Sign On enabled so the you will not be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk Customers upgrading from revisions prior to 1603 or customers that have modified the default FactoryTalk Security configuration will be prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk
If prompted to Log On to FactoryTalk enter a valid set for FactoryTalk credentials In the example below the FactoryTalk Directory (FTD) was configured with an account called FTADMIN
22 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 2
3 Navigate to the controller resource the secured project file was downloaded to
Refer to the section Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File on page 18
4 Right click on the controller resource and select Properties
5 In the Logical Name drop down list select the Controller name
This name should match the settings from the Controller Properties page that you created during Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File section The controller name can also be manually typed in if the name does not appear in the drop down list
TIP bull The controller in the Network and Devices tree will also display the controller name property next to the controller resource
bull If the name does not appear in the Network and Devices tree open RSLinx Classic and navigate to the controller resource with RSWho Navigating to the resource in RSLinx Classic will update the Controller path information in RSLinx Classic FactoryTalk Administration Console uses the controller path information from RSLinx Classic to display Controllers Once the path information is updated in RSLinx Classic open the FactoryTalk Administration Console and right click on the Network and Devices tree and select refresh
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 23
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 2 Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
6 Once the Logical Name for the Controller has been set to match the Controller name click OK to continue
This completes the FactoryTalk Security configuration for an RSLogix 5000 controller resource Individual user or groups rights will still need to be configured to control access to secured Controllers For more FactoryTalk Security information refer to The FactoryTalk Security Quick Start publication FTSEC-QS001
24 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 3
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to migrate from a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server To migrate to a FactoryTalk Security Server you must first export the security server database and then import the datebase into FactoryTalk
Import a Security Server Database
Follow these steps to import a security server database into FactoryTalk Security
1 From the Start menu select Programs -gt Rockwell Software -gt FactoryTalk Tools -gt Import RSSecurity Configuration
2 Select Import File
25Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 25
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
3 Choose import file and FT Directory Destination
4 Click Yes at the Warning message
5 Provide your username and password to logon to FactoryTalk
Import status displays
26 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
6 Select how should action and resource groups be imported in to FactoryTalk and click OK
7 Review import issue resolution and click continue
8 Select a group to import
9 Right click select add area and browse to the resource location
10 Click OK
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 27
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
11 Review how these were mapped in to existing FT applications and click OK
Import complete graphic displays
Import Status Text File
This graphic shows and example of the Import Status text file that is created when an import is completed
28 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server Chapter 3
Organizer Import Result
This graphic shows the results of the import process in the Organizer
Resource Editor
This graphic shows the results of the import in the Resource Editor
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 29
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 3 Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Notes
30 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 4
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction This chapter describes how to apply source protection to your RSLogix 5000 routines and Add-On Instructions
Installation Follow these steps to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
1 Locate the Source Protection tool on the RSLogix 5000 installation CDdENUToolsSource Protection Tool
2 Double-click on the file RS5KSrcPtcexe to install RSLogix 5000 Source Protection
3 Click Yes
31Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 31
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Follow these steps to configure source protection on a project file
Source Protection can only be configured on a off-line project file
1 Open an off-line project file
2 Launch Source Protection from the Tool - Security menu
Source Protection requires a Source key file location to be specified
3 Click Yes to specify Source Key File location
4 Click Browse to specify Source Key File location
5 Navigate to the folder location to store the key file
32 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The key file can be saved in any accessible folder In this example CRSLogix5000Project folder was specified as the key file location
6 Click OK to continue
If a key file in not found in the specified location you will be prompted to create a new key file
7 Click Yes to continue and create the new key file
Source Protection will have all Program Routines Add-On Instructions and Equipment State Phase Routines in the project file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 33
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
8 Select a routine that requires protection and click Protect
9 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
In this example dayofweek is being set as the key for the routine DayOfWeek Normally the key would not be set to match the routine name
10 Click OK to continue
The DayOfWeek routine is now protected with the key ldquodayofweekrdquo
11 Select the next routine that requires protection and select Protect
12 Enter a Source key to apply to the routine
34 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
In this example test_dow is being set as the key for the routine Test_Dow and the Test_DOW routine will be viewable
13 Click OK to set the key for the routine
The Test_DOW routine is protected but can be viewed in a read only mode by sources that do not have the key file
TIP You can set a protected routine to allow or deny viewing of the routine from a system that does not have keys required to access the routine When allow viewing is set a routine can be viewed in a read only mode
Protected routines that do not allow viewing cannot be viewed by systems that do not have the required key files
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 35
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
The remaining Valve_Logic routine and the MyValveAOI Add-On Instruction were also protected following the same procedure
14 Once all the routines and Add On-Instructions that requires protection are assigned keys click Close
15 Save the project file and download it to the controller
When the project file is opened on a system that does not contain the keys used to secure the routines and Add-On Instructions they will be protected based on the setting in Source Protection Configuration Test_DOW was protected and set to viewable in Source Protection Configuration
36 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
The routine can be opened as read only on a system that does not contain the key for the routine but the user will not be able to modify the routine
Routines or Add-On Instructions that are protected but were not configured as viewable cannot be opened The DayOfWeek routine cannot be opened on a system that does not have the key used to protect the routine In this graphic the icon for the routine is grayed out indicating the routine cannot be opened
The MyValveAOI cannot be viewed on a system the does not contain the key used to protect the Add-On Instruction This is because MyValveAOI was protected but not set to be viewable The Add-On Instruction is shown in the projects explorer window but the Parameters and Local Tags for the Add-On
Inactive icons are grey
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 37
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Instructions are not viewable on a system that does not contain the required key used to protect it
This graphic shows the Add-On Instruction MyValveAOI viewed from a system that has the key used secure the instruction
Local Tags and Logic are not viewable Parameters can be viewed but not edited
Parameters Local Tags and Logic are viewable and can be edited
38 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Key File and Key Distribution
The Source Protection keys are stored in text file un-encrypted It is recommended that the key file be backed up and stored in a secure location If necessary the individual keys can be distributed or provided to the necessary parties
The keys created when the routines and Add-On Instructions were secured with Source Protection were stored in the file skdat un-encrypted
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 39
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Clear
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
4 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
40 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 4
Disable Routine Source Protection
1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project that is protected
2 From the Tools menu choose Security gt Configure Source Protection
3 Click Disable Ability To Configure Protected Routines
A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
4 Choose Yes
A dialog box asks if you want to delete the source key file (skdat)
5 Select Yes to remove or No not to remove the source key file from the computer
IMPORTANT Before you remove the source key file (skdat) from a computer either write down the source keys or make a copy of the file and store it in a secure location
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 41
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 4 Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Notes
42 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 5
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the RSLogix 5000 CPU Security Tool to lock a controller When a controller is locked no one can access until it is unlocked
Installation The Logix CPU Security Tool is automatically installed when you install RSLogix 5000 software version 17 If you find it is not installed follow these installation instructions The install file is located on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD under the Tools folder
To install the Logix CPU Security Tool do the following
1 Double-click the file RSLogix Security Tool Installermsi file
The Welcome Screen displays
2 Click Next
43Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 43
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Review the license agreement select the I Agree radio button and click Next
4 Accept the default installation location and click Next
44 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
5 Check the Add to Custom Tools box if it is not already checked and click Next
6 Confirm the installation and click Next
7 Please wait while the CPU Security Tool runs through the installation process
8 After the installation completes click Close
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 45
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
You can secure a controller with the Logix CPU Security Tool The tool is installed under the RSLogix 5000 Tools menu
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
Before a controller can be secured the path the controller must be specified
2 To specify a path to the controller use the RSWho button to locate a controller
Use the RSWho button to locate the controller you need to secure
46 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
3 Select the controller that you need to secure and click OK
The Logix CPU Security Tool displays the current status of the controller
4 Click Change Password
5 Enter a password in the new password field and confirm the password and click OK
Notice that the controller you selected is currently unsecured and there is no password set in the controller
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 47
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
The Password Status for the controller now indicates a Password exists in the controller but the controller is not secured yet
6 Click Secure Controller
7 Enter the password for the controller click Secure
The controller is now secured
If the controller has Nonvolatile Memory installed this check box would save the security state of the controller to Nonvolatile Memory
Refer to the RSLogix 5000 Help for additional information on how to Save to Nonvolatile Memory
The controller is now secured
48 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
Accessing a Secured Controller
When you try to access a controller that has been secured by the Logix CPU Security Tool and you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select the proper file
To access a secured controller do the following
1 From the Communication menu select Who Active
2 Select the secured controller and select Go Online
If you donrsquot have a local copy of the project file on your computer you will be prompted to select a file
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 49
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
3 Click Select file to either find the project file or to identify a location where to save a project file
4 Identify a file and click Select
5 Reply Yes to create the project and upload
You are prompted with an unspecific error message informational screen
6 Click OK to continue
50 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
An error message displays indicating that the controller is currently secured and will prevent you from going On-Line
If the project file already exists on the your system an error message displays that indicates that the controller is secured and you cannot go online
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
To remove security from a controller do the following
1 Start the Logix CPU Security Tool
2 Specify the path to the controller by using RSWho
3 Select the controller that you want to be unsecured and click OK
4 Select Unsecure Controller
The controller is currently secured
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 51
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
5 Enter the password for the controller and click Unsecure
The controller is now unsecured but the controller still knows the password
6 Select Exit
7 Click Yes to confirm exit and leave the controller in an unsecured state
Now you can now go online with the controller
Removing a Password
To remove the password follow these instructions
1 Click Change password
2 Remove the ldquordquo empty string and click OK
52 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool Chapter 5
The controller status is now UNSECURED
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 53
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Chapter 5 RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
54 Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
How Are We DoingYour comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the futureThank you for taking the time to provide us feedback
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
RADocumentCommentsrarockwellcom
Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature (1=needs improvement 2=satisfactory and 3=outstanding)
Pub TitleType Logix5000 Controllers Security
Cat No 1756 ControlLogix 1769 CompactLogix 1789 SoftLogix 1794 FlexLogix PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Pub No 1756-PM016B-EN-P Pub Date July 2008 Part No
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you
Completeness(all necessary information
is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you
procedurestep illustration feature
example guideline other
explanation definition
Technical Accuracy(all provided information
is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate
text illustration
Clarity(all provided information is
easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form
Your Name
Your TitleFunction Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments
LocationPhone ___No there is no need to contact me
___Yes please call me
___Yes please email me at _______________________
___Yes please contact me via _____________________
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen-Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124-9705
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Other Comments
PLEASE FOLD HERE
NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED
IN THE UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 59Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-PM016B-EN-P - July 2008 60Supersedes Publication 1756-PM016A-EN-P - September 2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Important User Information
Table of Contents
Preface
Purpose of this Manual
1- Introduction
FactoryTalk Security
FactoryTalk Directories
RSSecurity Server
2 - Configuring FactoryTalk Security with RSLogix 5000
Introduction
Install the Rockwell Software Security Emulator
Enable Security for RSLogix 5000 Software
Install FactoryTalk Service Platform
Secure an RSLogix 5000 Software Project File
Apply Security to a Controller Resource
3 - Migrating From a Security Server Database to a FactoryTalk Server
Introduction
Import a Security Server Database
Import Status Text File
Organizer Import Result
Resource Editor
4 - Configure Routine Source Protection in RSLogix 5000 Software
Introduction
Installation
Configuring Source Protection on a project file
Key File and Key Distribution
Remove Access to a Protected Routine
Disable Routine Source Protection
5 - RSLogix 5000 Software CPU Security Tool
Introduction
Installation
Securing a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Accessing a Secured Controller
Removing Security from a ControlLogix Controller with Logix CPU Security Tool
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-PM016B-EN-P
Logix5000 Controllers Security Programming Manual
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021
07012008
5
Black amp White
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
60
15
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
25
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
